Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EH55
DMR-EH56
Region number supported by
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
HARD DISK DRIVE
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
3
2
ALL
5
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the
following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/
Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland
(As of end of February 2006)
≥This service may not be available in some
areas in the above countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
RQT8415-L
EC EG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Getting started
Editing
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
STEP 1 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
GUIDE Plus+ system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GUIDE Plus+ data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Editing programme lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
Set up to match your television and remote control . .22
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 26
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 57
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make timer recordings . . . . 28
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . 30
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 31
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
VPS/PDC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Convenient functions
Linked operations with the TV (Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting the background style–Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Creating Top Menu–Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Recording broadcasts from an external equipment . . .33
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Recording from digital/satellite receiver or decoder . . . . . . . . . . 33
Linked timer recordings with
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
FUNCTIONS window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
external equipment (digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 33
Playing back
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Playing DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . .37
Regarding DivX discs,
Reference
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
RQT8415
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Disc type
≥160 GB
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD]
[RAM]
DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
Recording format
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still pictures
Video
Still pictures
Re-writable§1
Y
Y
Play on other players§2
–
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
–
Up to 5X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Y
Y [CPRM (➡ 81) compatible discs only.]
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
Y
Y
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Creating and editing
playlists
DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
DVD-R
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Disc type
Logo
≥
[-R] before finalization
[-R]DL] before finalization
[-RW‹V›] before finalization
Indicated in these
instructions by
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
DVD-Video format
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
Recording format
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Video
Video
Re-writable§1
t
t
Y
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalizing the disc
(➡ 62, 81).
Only after finalizing the disc
Play on other players§2
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
(➡ 62, 81).
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.
Up to 6X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
t
t
t
Recording both M 1 and
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
Creating and editing
playlists
t
t
t
RQT8415
(continued on the next page)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(continued)
+R DL
+R§5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
(double layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
Disc type
Logo
+RW
≥
–
–
–
[+R] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[+R]DL] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
Indicated in these
instructions by
[+RW]
+VR format
Recording format
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Video
Video
Re-writable§1
t
t
Y
Play on other players§2
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
Only on +RW compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 2.4X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
t
t
t
Recording both M 1 and
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
M 2 for bilingual
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
Creating and editing playlists
t
t
t
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use one time recording disc.
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalized are compatible and can be played.
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
§2
§3
§4
§5
§6
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches
and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.You can record other
programmes as DVD-Video format.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
[Note]
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording etc. are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (➡ 26).
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 62)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 61)
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the balance is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
Second recordable layer
The available
space
(Inner
section of the
disc)
(Outersection
of the disc)
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times ➡ 25
RQT8415
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card information
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-Audio
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in
these
[DVD-V]
[DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs
High fidelity music
discs
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording”
≥Played on this unit
if they have been recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 61) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-
Video format and play it on this unit.
in 2 channels.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the equipment
used for recording.
.
Disc type
Logo
DVD-R
CD
Video CD
SVCD§2
–
Indicated in
these
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
[VCD]
instructions by
Instructions
≥DVD-R§1 with video
recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with video recorded in
DivX
Recorded audio and music
(including CD-R/RW§1
Recorded music and video (including
CD-R/RW§1
)
)
≥DVD-R§1 with music
recorded in MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with music recorded in
MP3
≥DVD-R§1 with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF
≥CD-R and CD-RW§1
with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF
§1
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
Conforming to IEC62107.
§2
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (➡ 81) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks that
are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(Y: Possible to view, t: Impossible to view)
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥
DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized (
➡
81).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
≥Blu-ray
TV type
Yes/No
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD,
PAL
NTSC
PAL
Y
“Chaoji VCD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and
SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107, etc.
Multi-system TV
Y§1
t
Y§2
NTSC TV
PAL TV
NTSC
PAL
Y
Y§3 (PAL60)
NTSC
§1
If you select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70), the picture may be
clearer.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70).
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2
§3
RQT8415
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (➡ 70).
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards you can use on this unit
Type
SD Memory Card
miniSDTM Card§
MultiMediaCard
Indicated in these instructions
by
[SD]
Data that can be recorded and
played
Still pictures
Video (MPEG2)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§ A miniSDTM card adaptor included with the miniSDTM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 40, 56).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a
photo developing store (➡ 49, 81).
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or
DVD-RAM. (➡ 55)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.
≥Compatible with: FAT 12 or FAT 16
Suitable SD Memory Cards
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
8 MB,
128 MB,
16 MB,
256 MB,
32 MB,
512 MB,
64 MB,
1 GB,
2 GB (Maximum)
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is
formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 61, 81).
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following
¢¢¢: Numbers
DVD-RAM
can be displayed on this unit.
XXX: Letters
Card
(Higher folder)
DCIM
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
JPEG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
(Higher folder)
DCIM¢¢¢
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
§
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§
DCIM
¢¢¢XXXXX
SD_VIDEO
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
(MPEG2 folder)
PRG¢¢¢
MOV¢¢¢MOD
MOV¢¢¢MOI
PRG¢¢¢PGI
(MPEG2 information folder)
MGR_INFO
§ Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
RQT8415
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
When recording a
bilingual programme
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 36, Changing audio during play)
(➡ 67, Bilingual Audio Selection)
M 1
However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 67, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26)
M 2
M 1
Hello
Hallo
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
If you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external
equipment.
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
When recording 16:9
aspect (Widescreen)
programmes
Recorded in 4:3 aspect
16:9 aspect (Widescreen)
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 86X§); however, the following settings are necessary
before recording to the HDD.
When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
Setup
Settings for Recording
Recording time in EP mode EP (8 Hours)
Rec for High Speed Copy
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
On
HDD
Tuning
Maximum
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 81) compatible DVD-RAM.
When recording digital
broadcasts
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD]
Y
k
(Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (➡ 62).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Í
/I
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE
H
RC
SEA
R
ENTE
V
O
L
Y
PLA
DIS
U
MEN
OP
T
URN
RET
NU
ME
O
N
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalize
EN
OP
D
UN
RO
UR
A.S
E
EP
EA
T
R
MOD
ITOR
PIC
MON
E
M
ODE
TUR
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
and +R DL
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT8415
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
saving recorded content to a disc.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer become usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem,
copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
≥Do not place in an enclosed area so the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
This unit
VCR
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
≥Place in an area where condensation
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture
forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the
unit.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ When “SLEEP” appears on the unit’s display
The HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be placed in the SLEEP mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in SLEEP mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the SLEEP mode.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
RQT8415
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
RQT8415
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of January 2006. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
(EUR7659Y60)
1
Remote control
1
AC mains lead
2
RF coaxial cables
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
Audio/video
cable
≥For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
The remote control information
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
Remote control signal sensor
20
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
30
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
7 m directly in front of the unit
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
[Note]
If you cannot operate the unit or television using the remote control
after changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (➡ 23).
RQT8415
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
?
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 24, 34, 40)
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 Cancel
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
7 Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame (➡ 36)
8 Show Top menu/Direct Navigator (➡ 34, 35, 44)
9 Show sub menu (➡ 44)
: Colour buttons for switching between Video/Picture and Video/
Playlists, selecting character type when entering text, manual
tuning settings and GUIDE Plus+ operations
(➡ 29, 34, 53, 63, 69)
; Start recording (➡ 24)
< Change recording mode (➡ 24)
= Select audio (➡ 36)
> Show status messages (➡ 43)
DVD
TV
1
Í
Í
@
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
3
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
A
B
4 5 6
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
C
D
INPUT
? Transmit the remote control signal
@ Television operations (➡ 23)
A Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ system
(➡ 24, 29)
0
SELECT
4
5
SKIP
SLOW/SSEARCH
B Show SHOWVIEW screen (➡ 30)
C Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 33, 58)
D Delete items (➡ 50)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
E
Show timer recording programme screen (➡ 30)
PROG/CHECK
F Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen (➡ 19, 28)
G Show FUNCTIONS window (➡ 64)
H Return to previous screen
E
F
6
7
I
I Create chapter (➡ 36)
J Skip 30 seconds forward (➡ 36)
K Direct TV recording (➡ 59)
L Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
M Skip the specified time (➡ 36)
N Show on-screen menu (➡ 42)
O Recording functions
8
9
G
ENTER
H
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
I
J
MANUAL SKIP
[Note]
:
;
≥Buttons such as the [¥ REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥If you press [EXT LINK] accidentally, the unit turns off and switches
to recording standby mode. Press [EXT LINK] again to cancel
recording standby.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your television if you set
the television manufacturer code (➡ 23).
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
K
L
M
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
<
=
>
O
RQT8415
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
3
5
4
2
1
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k1.3
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
6
;
7
9
<
=
:
>
8
Opening the front panel
Press down on the
part with your finger
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 18)
9 Open/close disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
: Select drive (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
; Stop (➡ 24, 35)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 58)
4 SD card slot (➡ below)
5 Display (➡ below)
< Start play (➡ 34)
= Start recording (➡ 24)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 26)
> Remote control signal sensor
6 Connection for camcorder etc. (➡ 58)
7 Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
8 Channel select (➡ 24)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14, 15)
Inserting, Removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 7).
Opening the cover
Inserting the card
Removing the card
Closing the cover
Press the protruding
part to open the
cover.
Press down.
1
2
Press on the centre of
the card.
Pull it straight out.
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSDTM card, insert it
into the miniSDTM card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
ADAPTER
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. ➡ right)
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to the SD drive
( ➡ 40, 56).
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
The unit’s display
3
2
1
REC
4
5
PLAY
6
8
7
1 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
2
Playback
Recording/Playback
Recording
REC
REC
PLAY
PLAY
3 Timer recording indicator
4 Lights when the SD card is inserted in the card slot.
6 Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected
7 Main display section
RQT8415
5 Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
8 Recording mode
tray.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➡ 59).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (➡ 81).
[Required]setting] “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–D. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.
Connecting a television
A
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
Aerial
cable
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV IN
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
(included)
RF coaxial
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
cable
(included)
3
2
1
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
4
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
(
)
AV1 TV
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a television and VCR
B
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
To the aerial
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV IN
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
(included)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Connect only after all other
5
connections are complete.
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
4
6
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
(
)
AV1 TV
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT
This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette
recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.
2
3
1
21-pin Scart
cable
Aerial
cable
Television
Television
AV OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF OUT
This unit
VCR
VCR
VCR’s rear panel
This unit
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)
RQT8415
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a television and digital/satellite receiver or decoder
C
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Aerial
cable
VHF/UHF
AV IN
RF IN
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
connections are complete.
1
2
3
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
5
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
(
)
AV1 TV
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT
This unit’s rear panel
[Required]setting]
4
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)
21-pin Scart cable
When you wish to view another programme this unit
is recording while watching a decoded broadcast
Press [0]i[ENTER]. (“DVD” appears on the unit’s
display.) Press again to cancel. (“TV” appears on the
unit’s display.)
AV OUT
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
Connecting a television and VCR, digital/satellite receiver or decoder
D
Television’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
To the aerial
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV IN
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16)
AC mains lead
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
6
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
5
Cooling fan
7
RF
OUT
RF
IN
(
)
AV1 TV
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT
This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial
cable
21-pin Scart cable
(included)
2
1
4
3
Aerial
cable
AV OUT
AV OUT
AV IN
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
VCR’s rear
panel
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF OUT
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 14, [B] )
RQT8415
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
Other connections
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
R
L
IN
IN
R
L
IN
IN
Red White
Red White Yellow
S Video
cable
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Red White Yellow
Red White
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 81) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
PR
AUDIO IN
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
R
L
Y
PB
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (Factory setting ➡ 68),
even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive output can
cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system televisions
using PAL mode.
Red White
Video cable
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
CRT
Red White
RF
OUT
RF
N
(
)
AV1 TV
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AU
(PCM/BITS
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT
Progressive output
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
This unit
This unit’s rear panel
For progressive output (➡ 22)
RQT8415
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input
∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier
terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 67)
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when
playing DVD-Audio.
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L
Amplifier’s rear panel
Red White
OPTICAL IN
Optical digital
audio cable
Do not bend
sharply when
Audio cable
Insert fully, with this
connecting.
side facing up.
Red White
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
IDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
)
/EXT
This unit’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This
unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does
not work.
RQT8415
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
≥If the Country setting menu appears on the television.
e.g., [DMR-EH55]
Country
België
Deutschland
Belgique
Belgien
Danmark
España
Österreich
Portugal
Suomi
Sverige
Schweiz
Suisse
DVD
TV
Í DVD
Í
Í
France
Italia
Nederland
Norge
SELECT
VOLUME
Svizzera
Others
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
ENTER
RETURN
PAGE
CH
RETURN: leave ENTER: access
W X
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].
Numbered
buttons
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
If you select “Schweiz”, “Suisse” or “Svizzera” in the Country
setting, or when the television tuning setting has been set to
Switzerland, the “Power Save” setting menu appears. Select
“On” or “Off” (➡ 68).
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW//SEARCCH
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
PROG/CHECK
After set up is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears.
I
D
E
U
G
TV Aspect
GUIDE
O
T
I
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
V
T
I
N
T
O
N
ENTER
S
E
R
I
4:3 TV
4:3
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
Letterbox
S
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
SELECT
MANUAL SKIP
SUB MENU
ENTER
RETURN
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
≥16:9: 16:9 widescreen television
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
≥4:3: 4:3 aspect television
[HDD] [RAM] Titles are recorded as they appear on screen.
[DVD-V] Video recorded for a widescreen is played as Pan
& Scan (unless prohibited by the producer of the
disc) (➡ 81).
≥Letterbox:4:3 aspect television
Widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 81).
3 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [ENTER].
When television type and aspect is set, the GUIDE Plus+
setting screen appears.
1 Turn on the television and select the
Auto-Setup
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Do you want to setup
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?
Yes
No
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
SELECT
RETURN
When connecting to a television that has the Q Link functions
ENTER
(➡ 59), downloading from the television starts.
(The above message also appears in countries where GUIDE
Plus+ system is not available. However set up is not possible.)
Download from TV
Pos
4
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Proceed to step 2 (➡ 19, GUIDE Plus+ system settings)
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system or if
you live in a country where GUIDE Plus+ system is not
available (➡ 19, Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system)
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Set up is complete.
RETURN
You can download the tuning positions from the television.
This unit’s Auto Clock Setting function synchronizes the time
when the TV channel that is broadcasting time and date
information is tuned.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (➡ 71).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 69)
∫ To restart set up (➡ 70)
RQT8415
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system
3
One of the following screens will appear
Confirm the message on the screen.
The GUIDE Plus+ system provides programme information from
the host station displayed on the television like a TV programme
magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too. Simply
select the desired programme from the displayed list. You can
also search for desired programmes by displaying only the
programmes in a certain category.
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
12.1 Wed
12.1. Wed 15:05
7th Heaven
15:30
15:05~16:05
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
...
Derrick Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
RTL
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/Netherlands/
Spain/Switzerland
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
-24 Hr
If “No Data”
appears (➡ 20,
Editing
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
...
Abenteuerurlaub
+24 Hr
Aktuell
(As of end of February 2006)
Prog.Type
programme
lists,
Reference)
≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above
countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
TIMER REC
RETURN
info
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
Display Mode
GUIDE
GUIDE Plus+ download is completed.
[Note]
You will need to complete Channel reception settings (➡ 18) to
setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not
set correctly.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible
via the antenna input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE
Plus+ data via externally connected satellite receivers or digital
set-top boxes is not possible.
No Host Channel was detected.
Please refer to Operating Instructions.
Press ENTER to continue.
Visit following homepage for more information.
ENTER
RETURN
GUIDE Plus+ system is not available.
Check the host channel of your country.
(➡ 21, Host Channel)
1 Press [GUIDE].
12.1. Wed 15:05
12.1. Wed 15:05
Postal Code
Setup
Current Country: Germany
Data download was unsuccessful.
Next download time slot will be at XX:XX.
This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times
a day.
Clicking noise may hear at that time.
Press ENTER to continue.
ENTER
ENTER
0
~
9
RETURN
RETURN
To download GUIDE Plus+ data, turn off your unit at the time
displayed on the screen or download the data manually from
“Data Download” in the Setup menu at that time.
(➡ 21, Changing the settings)
2 Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons
to enter the Postal Code of your
location and press [ENTER].
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
No
Yes
Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?
It may take time up to 2 hours.
≥For further information about operating the GUIDE Plus+
programme list, refer to “Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system”.
(➡ 29)
ENTER
[Note]
RETURN
If your Postal Code changes, you can update this information later in
the Setup of the GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21, Changing the
settings).
It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
To download the GUIDE Plus+ data later
(➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data download)
RQT8415
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Refer to the control reference on page 18.
Editing programme lists
GUIDE Plus+ data download
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the
television station transmitting the television programme list) several
times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [SUB MENU].
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
12.1 Wed
12.1. Wed 15:05
There are 2 ways to download GUIDE Plus+ data.
–Download automatically when the unit is turned off.
–Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:05~17:05
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
...
Derrick Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
RTL
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...
7th Heaven
Yu-...
Gilmore...
Download data automatically
...
Die Abschl... F
PRO7
Setup
Editor
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit
is turned off.
ENTER
RETURN
During download, “GUIDE” appears in
the display of your unit.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and
press [ENTER].
CH DC BS DUB EXT Link MPEG4 D.MIX
NET
-
DVD AVCD
PLAY
HDD
-
+
RWRAM
SP
RPLAY
PC
DVD
SD
LP VR
EP SDPC
12.1. Wed 15:05
Editor
On/Off
Reference
Name
WDR
Source
Tuner
Tuner
If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update is
interrupted.
On
On
TF1
TF6
***04
***05
Euros
ARD
ZDF
BBC1
On
FR6
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.
To ensure the GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded, you can disable
the timer recordings during data transmission. (➡ 21, left column,
Night Download)
On
On
On
On
On
ESPRT
ARD
- - - -
BBC1
ARTE
***06
ENTER
RETURN
PAGE+
4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
“Name” and press [1].
You can also press [W X CH] to browse through the station
Download data manually
list.
At the data transmission time, you can download the data manually
from “Data Download” in the Setup menu (➡ 21).
On/Off
To select the stations to be displayed on the
programme list.
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and
press [ENTER].
Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a
station, this station is either not supported by the
GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could
not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the
Reference field of this station). In this case, set the
appropriate Reference manually.
[Note]
You can also manually assign the appropriate
Reference even if a station name was not recognized
(e.g. ***06).
≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately
one day before you can display the television programme list.
≥The stations displayed in the television programme list are
determined according to geographical areas.
≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the
television programme list even if a signal can be received.
≥Once you have downloaded the programme list, reception of data
is required regularly to update and maintain the programme list.
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.
≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating
sounds.
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
12.1 Wed
12.1. Wed 15:05
7th Heaven
15:30
15:05~16:05
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
...
Derrick Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
RTL
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
-24 Hr
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
...
Abenteuerurlaub
+24 Hr
Aktuell
Prog.Type
TIMER REC
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
Display Mode
GUIDE
Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the
appropriate station and press [ENTER].
[Note]
The station names in the Reference list can deviate
from the station list.
[Note]
Changes in the station list in the Setup menu (➡ 69) of your unit will
cause all Editor settings to return to the initial condition.
RQT8415
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Channel
Changing the settings
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.
It is not possible to receive GUIDE Plus+ data in all countries
(➡ below).
1 Press [GUIDE].
Check whether the right Host Channel has been input.
2 Press [SUB MENU].
List of Host Channel (As of end of February, 2006)
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
Display of the Host
12.1 Wed
12.1. Wed 15:05
Country
Host Channel
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:05~17:05
Channel
EUROS
EUROS
EUROS
CANAL
TELE5
SI
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
Germany
Austria
Eurosport
Eurosport
Eurosport
Canal+§2
Tele5
...
Derrick Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
RTL
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...
7th Heaven
Yu-...
Gilmore...
Switzerland§1
France
...
Die Abschl... F
PRO7
Setup
Editor
ENTER
RETURN
Spain
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
Italy
Sport Italia
press [ENTER].
Eurosport/Music
Factory (TMF)
Netherlands§3
EUROS / TMF
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
RTL-TVI/
Music Factory
(TMF)
Postal Code
Belgium§4
RTLTV/TMF
RTLTV
XXXXX
EUROS
Host Channel
Data Download
Luxembourg§5
RTL-TVI
Night Download
On
§1 German-speaking regions only
§2 Analogue terrestrial broadcast only
ENTER
RETURN
§3 Eurosport now covers the whole Dutch region. TMF will cease
transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006. When TMF
ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the Host Channel
to Eurosport manually.
§4 RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006, and will cover the
whole of Belgium. TMF covers only Flemish speaking regions and
will cease transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006.
When TMF ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the
Host Channel to RTL-TVI manually.
4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].
Postal
Code
To enter the Postal Code
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive
regional data.
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to
enter your Postal Code and press [ENTER].
§5 RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006. The Luxembourg
line-up is available by setting up GUIDE Plus+ as country=Belgium
with the postal code 9999 (➡ 19, step 2).
Host
Channel
To change the Host Channel manually
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred
via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is
recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the
system automatically.
≥To change the Host Channel manually ➡ left
1
Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in
missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.
2
≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.
≥To check the host channels of your country
➡ right column, Host Channel
Data
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually
Download Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The update can take approximately 2 hours.
≥For further informations ➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data
download
Night
Download
To select the priority during midnight
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM
every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete
data download.
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a
timer recording overlap, you can select which will be
given priority.
On: Data Download
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for
data download.
Off: Timer programming
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.
After recording finishes, we recommend you to
change this setting to “On”.
Press [
2,
1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or
Host Channel.
≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the
receipt of wrong or no data.
RQT8415
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set up to match your television and remote control
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
DVD
TV
TV operation
buttons
Í
Í
Setup
VOLUME
CH
TV Aspect
4:3
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Off
Progressive
TV System
AV1 Output
AV2 Settnigs
PAL
Video
Tuning
PAGE
CH
Disc
Picture
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
Sound
Display
TAB
RETURN
SELECT
ENTER
ShowView
DELETE
Connection
Others
8 9
7
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
and press [ENTER].
STOP
PROG/CCHECK
Setup
Progressive
I
D
E
U
On
Off
R
F
Tuning
U
N
I
C
V
A
T
Disc
N
T
I
O
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
N
C
ENTER
S
E
Picture
Sound
Display
R
I
D
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
Connection
Others
S
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
AUDIO STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
[ENTER].
Output becomes progressive.
[Note]
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 43).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
To enjoy progressive video
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 81).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
To exit the screen
FUNCTIONS
Press [RETURN] several times.
HDD
Remain 70:00 SP
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Tuning
Download from TV
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
SELECT
TAB
Connection
Others
RETURN
RQT8415
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
Volume
VOLUME
CH
Turn TV on/off
Input select
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1
While stopped
Channel
Select
PAGE
CH
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 3
1
4 5 6
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
1
Point the remote control at the television
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
press [ENTER].
with the numbered buttons.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
press [1].
Manufacturer and Code No.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Brand
Code
Brand
Code
Control” and press [ENTER].
Panasonic
01/02/03/04/ NOKIA
45
25/26/27
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
AIWA
35
NORDMENDE
10
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[ENTER].
AKAI
27/30
09
ORION
37
BLAUPUNKT
BRANDT
BUSH
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PYE
05/06
31/33
38
10/15
05/06
31
Remote Control
Setup
Press “ ” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2 seconds on the remote
control.
Tuning
Disc
CURTIS
DESMET
DUAL
05/06
05/06
10
05/31/33
05/06
31
RADIOLA
SABA
Picture
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
SALORA
26
To change the code on the remote control
10
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SBR
31/32/43
05/31/33
21
GOLDSTAR/LG 31
7 While pressing [ENTER], press and
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
05/06/31
09
hold the numbered button ([1], [2] or
[3]) for more than 2 seconds.
06
22/23/31/40/ SCHNEIDER
41/42
05/06/29/
30/31
8 Press [ENTER].
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
34
SELECO
SHARP
06/25
18
30
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
25
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
unit’s display
JVC
17/39
07/46
28/31
05/06/33
08
LOEWE
METZ
The unit’s remote control code
TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
06/19/20
24
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
10/15/44
16
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 7).
NEC
36
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
05/06
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
To return to the previous screen
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
RQT8415
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
2
5
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
EXT LINK
CH
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
To select with the numbered buttons:
∫
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
1
3
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
1
PAGE
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Numbered
buttons
3
ShowView
DELETE
Remaining time
8 9
7
on the disc
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 67).
;
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
PROG/CCHECK
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
ID
U
G
C
T
N
O
REC
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change the channel or recording mode
while paused; however, the recording will then be as a
separate title.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording, but once the time for the timer recording to begin
is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer
recording will begin.
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
5
4
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
AUDIO
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
≥[HDD] [RAM] You can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)
[HDD]
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
≥
You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording
for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalize them (➡ 62).
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
If a station broadcasts Teletext information
The unit automatically records the programme’s and station’s name
if the station’s Title Page is correctly set (➡ 69).
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
[Note]
The unit may take some time in retrieving titles (up to 30 minutes)
and may fail in some cases.
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc
Quick Start (➡ 68)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
From the power on, recording starts in about 1 second§ after
the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE button is pressed
while the unit is off, the Electronic Program Guide (EPG)
displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 60, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is
inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-
RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
RQT8415
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
HDD
(160 GB)
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
Double-
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
Recording Mode
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
+RW
(4.7 GB)
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
36 hours
1hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
SP (Standard
70 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
recording mode)
LP (Long recording
mode)
138 hours
EP (Extra long
284 hours
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
recording mode)§4
(212hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(12 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2
)
8 hours
maximum for
one side
FR (Flexible
284 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
9 hours maximum
Recording Mode)§4
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
§4
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
Disc Insertion/Ejection
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
When removing a recorded disc
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalize
Finalize the disc so that is can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalizing.This may take up to min.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management?
Press the REC button to start finalize.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalizing.
Yes
No
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
∫ To finalize the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu (➡ 62)”, “Auto-Play Select (➡ 62)” or
“Disc Name (➡ 60)” in “DVD Management” before finalizing.
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 61)
∫ To open the tray without disc finalization
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT8415
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
Recording settings for High Speed
Copy
DRIVE
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
SELECT
k
1
.3
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW after you
have recorded to the HDD
If copying a title using the high speed mode to a DVD-R, etc., set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
However, the following restrictions apply:
≥When recording bilingual broadcasts, either the main or
secondary audio can be recorded.
¥ REC
∫
1
DRIVE
SELECT
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
–If you do not connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” in “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the
Setup menu (➡ 67).
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
–If you connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
≥Even 16:9 aspect (Widescreen) programmes are recorded in
4:3 aspect.
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Refer to the “Important notes for recording” for more information
(➡ 8).
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
1
PROG/CCHECK
1
While stopped
I
D
U
G
DIRECT
Press [FUNCTIONS].
NAVIGATOR
C
T
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
N
O
T
C
ENTER
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
R
I
3,4,2,1
and press [ENTER].
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
press [ENTER].
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
STATUS
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Recording” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec for High
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Speed Copy” and press [ENTER].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 28) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 27).
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
≥If you change the channel or recording mode while recording is
paused, the time specified to stop recording is cancelled.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To start recording
≥Recording television programmes (➡ 24)
≥Timer recording (➡ 28)
To cancel
≥Copying from a video cassette recorder (➡ 58)
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
[Note]
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT8415
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
When you want to start recording
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
and press [ENTER].
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
≥Recording starts.
XP
SP
LP
EP
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
To exit the screen without recording
e.g., HDD
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Press [RETURN].
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
HDD
REC 0:59
ARD
M 1 / M 2
L R
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
Remaining
time of
recording
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
get recorded.
To stop play
≥Another disc is necessary.
Press [∫].
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
1
2
Press [∫].
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
Necessary space for recording
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
1
While stopped
and press [ENTER].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
Press [FUNCTIONS].
backward.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
To stop play
Press [∫].
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
and press [ENTER].
Flexible Rec
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.
Record in FR mode.
To stop recording
After play stops
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Start
Cancel
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
3
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
To stop timer recording
After play stops
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
3
4
[Note]
RQT8415
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make
timer recordings
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
You can perform timer recordings by simply selecting the desired
k
1
.3
EXT LINK
CH
programme from the television programme list.
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
∫
¥ REC
Before using the GUIDE Plus+ system
≥The television programme list is not displayed immediately after
purchasing this unit.
DRIVE
SELECT
EXT LINK
≥You must complete initial setup for the GUIDE Plus+ system.
DVD
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system settings” (➡ 19) for more
information.
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 3
4 5 6
1
W X
CH
Numbered
buttons
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
15.7.Tue
15.7. Tue 15:05
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:05~17:05
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
16:00
16:30
7
Time: 15:00
ShowView
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
INPUT
INPUT SELECT
0
SELECT
¢
...
Derrick Heute in ...
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
RTL
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
Yu-...
;
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
Gilmore...
...
7th Heaven
S.O.S Style & ...
Prog.Type
Die Abschl... Freunde...
+24 Hr
PRO7
-24 Hr
PROG/CCHECK
PROG/CHECK
ID
U
G
TIMER REC
RETURN
info
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
GUIDE
Display Mode
GUIDE
C
T
3,4,2,1
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
ENTER
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
SUB MENU
RETURN
programme.
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
“Blue”
3 Press [ENTER].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
“Green”
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
¥ REC
Timer
Remain
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Recording
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
REC MODE
HDD
DVD
VPS
Name
Date
Start
16:00
Stop
17:00
Mode
PDC
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD
SP
OFF
Programme Name
Fliege-Die Talkshow
≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 30, right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Preparation
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
15.7.Tue
15.7. Tue 15:05
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 24).
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:05~17:05
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
Timer icon
FFliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
...
Derrick Heute in ...
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 71).
1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
VPS
HDD
Drive
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
New Timer Programme
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space
HDD
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed
(➡ 31, Check, change or
delete a programme).
20:00
SP OFF OK
F01
19:00
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
[Note]
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 70), the GUIDE
Plus+ system cannot be used.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
RQT8415
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system
Basic operations
Selecting the programme from the desired category
The Programme Type function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list
sorted by main category (e.g. Movies, Sport). Each main category
will contain individual sub categories. The GUIDE Plus+ list for the
selected main category only appears in the Portrait view.
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view.
Landscape view
Landscape
Prog.Type
All Types
15.7.Tue
15.7. Tue 15:05
Gilmore girls
15:30
16:05~17:05
16:00
16:30
Time: 15:00
1 Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of main categories.
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
-24 Hr
...
Derrick Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht
Das Familiengericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
Yu-...
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
Gilmore...
...
7th Heaven
S.O.S Style & ...
Prog.Type
Die Abschl... Freunde...
+24 Hr
main category.
Portrait
15.7 Tue
TIMER REC
RETURN
Prog.Type
All Types
info
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
15.7. Tue 15:05
Display Mode
GUIDE
All Types
ARD
RTL2
ZDF RTL SAT1
All
Movies
Sport
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
Tages
Action
Abent
Animation
Children
Other
Comedy
Fliege
Drama
Tages
Romance
Brisan
Sci Fi
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
Tages
Thriller
Portrait view
Adventure
Portrait
15.7 Tue
Verbo
Marienhof
+24 Hr
Prog.Type
All Types
15.7. Tue 15:05
ARD
RTL2
ZDF RTL SAT1
VOX PRO7
-24 Hr
Prog.Type
TIMER REC
RETURN
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
Tagesschau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Tagesschau um fünf
Brisant
The sub menu for the selected main category appears.
Example: Press [3, 4] to select the main category Movies.
The sub category with several movie categories appears
(e.g. All Types, Action, Animation, Comedy, Drama,
Romance, Sci Fi, Thriller, Adventure).
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
Tagesschau
Verbotene Liebe
Marienhof
+24 Hr
-24 Hr
Prog.Type
TIMER REC
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
Display Mode
GUIDE
3 Press [2] to go to the sub category
menu.
To change stations
Landscape view
1
Press [2] until the station list is
highlighted.
4 Press [3, 4] to make your selection.
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select a station.
5 Press [ENTER].
≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
Portrait
Action
Prog.Type
Movies
(e.g., Action)
12.1. Wed 15:05
ARD
RTL2
ZDF RTL SAT1
VOX PRO7
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [ENTER].
12. 1. Wed: 20:00~21:30 The fast and the fury
Ronin
21:30~23:00
23:00~01:15
Noch 60 Sekunden
Der Sturm
13. 1.Thu: 19:15~21:00
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Landscape
view.
21:00~22:30 Speed 2
Mission Impossible
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00
Portrait view
23:00~01:30 Volcano
Prog.Type
1
Press [3] until the station list is
highlighted.
TIMER REC
RETURN
info
SUB MENU
S
PAGE-
PAGE+
2
3
Press [2, 1] to select a station.
≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
A list appears with all programmes of the selected main
category and the selected sub category.
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
6 Press [3, 4] to go through the GUIDE
Press [ENTER].
Plus+ list.
If you want to change the station, press [3] until the station
list is highlighted and then press [2, 1].
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for the selected categories for
this station.
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Portrait
view.
To view a
programme for
another day
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
To navigate within the Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
GUIDE Plus+ list. Only current and future programmes are
shown.
To browse through the Press [W X CH].
GUIDE Plus+ list.
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time, short
description) is available for these
programmes.
symbol)
Press [ ] to show and hide the
information.
RQT8415
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Manually programming timer
recordings
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS
HDD
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space
Drive
No. Name
F01 ARD
Date
1 Press [ShowView].
15. 7.TUE
New Timer Programme
20:00 HDD
OFF
SP
19:00
OK
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
ShowView
Record
Remain
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [ENTER].
Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press ENTER.
3 Press [1] to move through the items
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
and change the items with [3, 4].
the SHOWVIEW number.
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
DVD
VPS
3 Press [ENTER].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Name
Date
Start
22:00
Stop
22:30
Mode
PDC
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD SP
OFF
Timer
Remain
Recording
Programme Name
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
DVD
VPS
Name
Date
Start
16:00
Stop
17:00
Mode
PDC
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD
SP
OFF
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
one day
l
l
l
;:
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
;:
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
4 Press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 32, Relief Recording).
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
Timer
Remain
Recording
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥VPS/PDC (➡ 32)
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Timer icon
F01
New T
ON!)OFF (– – –)
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
If the broadcasting station is not transmitting VPS/PDC
signals, “jjj” appears in the menu for timer programming
under “VPS/PDC”.
standby has been activated.
1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 32)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press
[ENTER]. (➡ 63, Entering text)
Recording
VPS
HDD
Drive
No. Name
ARD
Date
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space
HDD
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).
15. 7.TUE
New Timer Programme
20:00
SP OFF OK
F01
19:00
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
Timer
Remain
begun (➡ 31)
Recording
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Timer icon
F01
(➡ 31)
New T
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
VPS
HDD
Drive
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
New Timer Programme
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space
HDD
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).
20:00
SP OFF OK
F01
19:00
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
RQT8415
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1
While the unit is on
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
Stop Recording
Icons
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
Cancel
Stop Recording
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
F
X
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The material was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 32).
Recording” and press [ENTER].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
To release the unit from recording
standby
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1:58 SP
Timer
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
VPS
Recording
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
HDD
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space
Drive
No. Name
New Timer Programme
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ right) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ right) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
Press ENTER to store new programme.
ENTER
RETURN
Notes on timer recording
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
≥“F” flashes on the unit’s display for about 5 seconds when the unit
cannot go to timer recording standby.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 51).
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [ENTER].
(➡ 30, right column, step 3)
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [¢].
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It
takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If you
want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off” (➡ 21).
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap
[regardless of whether they are VPS/PDC (➡ 32) controlled], the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT8415
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
Relief Recording
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 34).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
≥Relief recording is not activated when recording the programme
with VPS/PDC and it is extended so that it no longer fits on the
disc.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[ENTER].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
DVD
VPS
RENEW
ON
Name
Date
SUN
Start
22:00
Stop
Mode
SP
PDC
OFF
1
ARD
22:30 HDD
Programme Name
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
VPS/PDC function
VPS (Video Programme System) or PDC (Programme Delivery Control) is a very convenient system which records exactly from beginning to end
of the TV programmes set in timer recording, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from the scheduled time due to delayed start or extension
of the programme duration. Also, if a programme is interrupted, for example, some special news is inserted, the recording will be paused
automatically and resumed when the programme continues.
When VPS/PDC recording
≥Use VPS/PDC time for recording the TV programmes.
≥Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when recording time is not VPS/PDC time.
≥VPS/PDC recording is not performed when VPS/PDC time is incorrect, even if only by one
minute. To find out VPS/PDC time, consult Teletext, a newspaper or magazine, or other source.
–If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC if you wish to proceed with VPS/PDC recording using
SHOWVIEW programming.
–The default settings for “VPS/PDC” is “OFF”
.
When the VPS/PDC signal drops out
Timer recording will be performed in the normal mode (without VPS/PDC) even if it was
because the broadcast signal is weak. programmed for VPS/PDC.
When a TV station does not transmit a In this case, even if the timer recording is performed, whatever has been programmed will not be
regular VPS/PDC signal.
cancelled at that particular time but at 4 a.m. two days later.
If the start times of scheduled
Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when programming a programme whose start time has been
programmes listed in the newspaper or subsequently changed.
magazine change at a later date.
[Note]
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.
≥Depending on the signals sent from the TV stations, the VPS/PDC system may not work properly even when “VPS/PDC” has been set to “ON”.
≥Please check with the broadcasters in your area for details.
≥VPS/PDC does not activate while this unit is on. The system stays inactive under the condition even its setting is “ON”. In such cases, recording
starts and finishes at times you set initially.
RQT8415
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording broadcasts from an external equipment
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital/satellite receiver) —
EXT LINK
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
To record programmes from digital/satellite receiver using timer
programming
Making timer recordings on the
television
(e.g., of digital broadcasts)
Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital/satellite receiver with a 21-pin
Scart cable (➡ 15).
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a
television with a Q Link function (➡ 59) that you can use for setting
timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68).
≥Set the “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68.)
1 Make timer programming on the TV.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
1 Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).
3 Turn off this unit.
The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).
[Note]
3 Press [EXT LINK].
≥When this unit is in timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby
(“F” or “EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s display), recording from
television does not start.
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to
indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).
[Note]
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
Recording from digital/satellite receiver
or decoder
Preparation
≥Connect a digital/satellite receiver or decoder to this unit’s input
≥When “AV2 Connection” is set to “Decoder”, EXT LINK is not
available (➡ 68).
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), The GUIDE Plus+ data cannot downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output”
setting (➡ 68).
terminals (➡ 15).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
have connected.
e.g.,If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
4 Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT8415
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Thumbnail Display
≥Table Display
∫
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
VIDEO
PICTURE
3
1
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
- - -
007
008
VOLUME
CH
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
1
Numbered
buttons
Rec time
0:52(SP)
- - -
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Page 01/01
4 5 6
7
ENTER
ENTER
Previous
S
SUB MENU
Next
Select
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
RETURN
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
0
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
INPUT
SELECT
1 Press [SUB MENU] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [ENTER].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
6, 5
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
3
2 [HDD] [RAM]
PROG/CCHECK
;
DIRECT
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
ID
U
G
NAVIGATOR,
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
“Top Menu”
C
T
2;, ;1
- - -
007
008
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
SUB MENU
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CHAPTER
1 Press [SUB MENU].
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
If you select an item other than “No.”
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
AUDIO
TIME SLIP
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High
Speed Copy” was set to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
Preparation
[ENTER].
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
≥Turn on this unit.
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
To show other pages
Press [
3
,
4,
2
,
1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER]. (Thumbnail Display only)
2
If you selected the DVD drive
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Direct Navigator screen icons
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
t
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 32, Relief Recording)
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function (➡ 24)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 81, CPRM)
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
(PAL)
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 70).
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 38)
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 60), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
RQT8415
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 70).
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[DVD-A] (excluding motion picture parts) [CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Skip
≥DivX : Backward direction [:] only.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a selected
title
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥MP3 and JPEG/TIFF
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selecting groups
While stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ right)
Input a 1-digit number
e.g., 5: [5]
≥Other discs (You can select a track with DVD Audio.)
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ above) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
RQT8415
(Continued on the next page)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 34.
Operations during play
(continued)
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Slow-motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD]).
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Frame-by-frame
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
-
5 min
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
and press [ENTER].
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 30 seconds later.
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
Create Chapter
(➡ 44, Title/Chapter)
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby.
[HDD] [RAM]
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 42, Soundtrack).
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
e.g., “L R” is selected
L R
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
RQT8415
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
DivX
[-R] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
File
DivX
format
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
of folders (including the root folder)
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
Number
of files
Support
version
DivX ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS(Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§3 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§3Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
MP3
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
[-R] [CD]
File
format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Root
Structure of MP3 folders
(folder=group)
001
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
Number
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
of folders 300 folders (groups)
(groups)
(including the root folder)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
002 group
Number
of files
(tracks)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Order of play
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
frequency
[-R] [CD]
ID3 tags
not compatible
Root
Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
Still pictures (JPEG, TIFF§2
)
≥When the highest level folders
are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
Playable
discs and
cards
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
File
format
File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
chunky format)
Order of play
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” or
“.TIF”.
Number
of pixels
34k34 to 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number
of folders
[-R] [CD] Maximum number of folders
recognizable:300 folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (including higher folders)
Number
of files
[-R] [CD] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1:3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other type of files is 4000.
§2 Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures, or when there are many files and/or folders, some
files may not display or be playable.
RQT8415
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Playing DivX discs
DVD
[-R] [CD]
TV
Í DVD
Í
Í
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
INPUT
0
SELECT
Folder1
:
00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
6, 5
No.
001
Name of Title
Tree
:, 9
ABC.avi
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
1
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
Page
001/001
Total Title : 001
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
RETURN
C
T
N
FUNCTIONS
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
≥Files are treated as titles.
3,4,2,1
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
RETURN
“Green”
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
SUB MENU
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
STAUTS
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
Selecting file type to play
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files, DivX video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on
a computer.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To stop playing
Press [∫].
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/
TIFF).
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
e.g.,
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
[Note]
from Menu in FUNCIONS.
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [ENTER].
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.
screen
Follow the steps below.
To select file type
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Play Mode : DivX
Menu
Menu
Recording
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
Copy
Folder
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
To Others
F
1/21
ENTER
RETURN
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Menu” and press
[ENTER].
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
DATA2
ENTER
RETURN
Menu
Select file type.
DivX
2 Press [
3
,
4] to select a folder and press [ENTER].
MP3
The file list for the folder appears.
JPEG
To return to the previous screen
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
Press [RETURN].
[ENTER].
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 39.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page
40
RQT8415
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
Playing MP3 discs
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files that have been recorded on a computer.
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 68, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX Registration
Setup
Selected group
DivX (R) Video On Demand
No.
Group
My favorite
Menu
G
1
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
1
1
G: Group No.
Track
Tree
Tuning
T
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
001 Both Ends Freezing
TOTAL
8 alphanumeric
characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint ItYellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
1/111
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Number
0
–
9
Prev.
Next
8
SELECT
9
10
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
Connection
Others
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Page 001/024
RETURN
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorization Error.” is displayed.)
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 38 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
Using the tree screen to find a group
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
Menu
Tree
G
T
8
MP3 music
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
G
7/25
14
TOTAL
40/111
Number
You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.
0
–
9
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
002 Vocal
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8415
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Refer to the control reference on page 38.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Playing still pictures
album and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
e.g., HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You can playback still pictures recorded onto a DVD-R or CD-R/
CD-RW on a PC.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card (➡ 13)
0005
0009
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
Select
S SUB MENU
RETURN
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View”, press [ENTER] and then
go to step 2 below.
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
SD Card
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
SELECT
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
RETURN
ENTER
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Selecting file type to play ➡ 38
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 41)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
HDD, DVD or SD drive.
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
Album View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
001
002
Recording date of the
first picture in the album/
number of pictures/
album name.
1. 1. 06 Total
Date: 1. 1.2006
5
1. 2. 06 Total
Date: 1. 2.2006
3
- - -
- - -
- - -
Page 01/01
SUB MENU
Previous
Next
ENTER
Press ENTER to show
pictures.
S
Slide Show
RETURN
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[-R] [CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
103__DVD
Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Folder
0001
0005
0009
0002
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
0006
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
(➡ Go to step 4)
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Picture in which the number of prints is set (DPOF)
(➡ 49, 81).
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder ➡ 41
RQT8415
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slide Show
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Slide Show Setting
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
1
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
[-R] [CD]
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
≥To change the display interval
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [ENTER].
≥Repeat Play
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
Rotate
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and
press [ENTER].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[-R] [CD] Still pictures
Rotate LEFT
ENTER
RETURN
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [ENTER].
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and
press [ENTER].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
ENTER
RETURN
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than
640 a 480 pixels.
While playing
Press [STATUS] twice.
Properties
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
3 / 9
Shooting date
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
[-R] [CD]
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
Folder
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
Folder
103__DVD
F
1/3
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
021216_0026
103_DVD
Select Folder
104_DVD
105_DVD
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
----
----
Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
S SUB MENU
RETURN
RQT8415
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
DVD
Soundtrack§
TV
Í
Í
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Language).
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
ShowView
DELETE
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
8 9
7
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Subtitle§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
PROG/CCHECK
I
D
U
G
C
T
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Angle§ [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
STATUS
DISPLAY
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
➡ 36, Changing audio during play
STILL-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Using on-screen menus
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
≥RANDOM: Plays in random order.
≥Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
Common procedures
Source Select (DivX)
≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Î Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Subtitle
Play
Off
Picture
Sound
Other
L R
Audio channel
PBC (Playback control ➡ 81) [VCD]
Menu
Item
Setting
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
§ With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 35) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Audio attribute
LPCM/PPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Number of channels
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
Language
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [ENTER].
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
THA: Thai
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
¢:
Others
RQT8415
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD][VCD]
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] and MP3
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
≥Track
[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
Select “Off” to cancel.
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Other menu—Change the display position
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (➡ 81)
Position
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 81, Film and video).
Status messages
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
Press [STATUS].
The display changes each time you press the button.
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
Selected drive/type of disc
HDD
The remaining time appears here while
REC
PLAY
stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
STEREO
L R
TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Selected audio type
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
When the output signal is NTSC
Date and time
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
π
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
13:50 XP
π T1 0:05.14 XP π T2 0:00.10 XP
Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
No display
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
≥TV audio type
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
STEREO:STEREO stereo broadcast
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M 1: Monaural broadcast
a video tape.
≥On:
≥Off:
Noise reduction works for input video.
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
§ Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 22).
RQT8415
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles/chapters
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1
2
During play or while stopped
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM]
2 3
4 5 6
1
ShowView
DELETE
Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
8 9
7
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
:, 9
;
1
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
Title View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
007
008
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
DIRECT
- - -
NAVIGATOR
C
T
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
ENTER
ENTER
Select Previous
S
Next
SUB MENU
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
SUB MENU
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
To show other pages
MANUAL SKIP
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalized discs.)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
4
5
Press [SUB MENU].
Title
Chapter
Press [3,
4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
Start
End
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER]. (➡ 45)
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 36, 45, Create Chapter)
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Title
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 45).
Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter View
Table Display
Album View
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 34
playlist (➡ 46).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
Playing still pictures ➡ 40, step 3
–Titles:
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
500
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1] to select the chapter.
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
–Chapters:
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
To edit ➡ Step 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
Chapter View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
[Note]
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:31.24
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
7
Press [SUB MENU], then [
select the operation and press [ENTER].
3
,
4] to
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 45).
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
Combine Chapters
Title View
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥You can go back to Title View.
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 60).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8415
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
You can give names to recorded titles.
➡ 63, Entering text
Enter Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title V
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Cancel Protection§
007
008
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
Partial Delete
VIDEO
PICTURE
1Press [ENTER] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
≥Select “Next” and press [ENTER] to delete other sections.
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Start
End
Next
Exit
(➡ below, For your reference)
0:43.21
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
RETURN
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [ENTER] when the image you want to use as a
Change Thumbnail
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
;
008
Change
(➡ below, For your reference)
Exit
0:00.00
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [ENTER]
at the point you want to change.
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
3Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
VIDEO
PICTURE
1Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [ENTER].
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Preview
(➡ below, For your reference)
Divide
Exit
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [ENTER]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [ENTER] at the point where you want to divide
the title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 81) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
1Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
Create Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Create
(➡ below, For your reference)
Exit
0:43.21
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 35), Time Slip (➡ 36) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 36) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 36).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT8415
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
press [ENTER].
2 3
1
4 5 6
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
INPUT
and press [ENTER].
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Playlists
HDD
- -
Playlist View
- -
- -
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Create
- -
- -
- -
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
C
T
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
N
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
and press [4].
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
≥Press [ENTER] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
S
SUB MENU
CREATE
CHAPTER
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 44) to create a playlist.
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Title
Title
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
want to add to a playlist and press
[ENTER].
Press [3] to cancel.
Copying (➡ 51) a playlist will create a title.
Create
Playlists
HDD
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
–Playlists:
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
99
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (➡ 45, Create Chapter)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlists
HDD
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
ENTER
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
≥[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (➡ 60).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 70).
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
1
While stopped
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
ShowView Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
HDD Management
RQT8415
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
1
While stopped
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
and press [ENTER].
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Properties
press [ENTER].
Dinosaur
No.
10
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53
playlist.
RETURN
ENTER
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–8
Create
Playlists
HDD
01
Playlist View
- -
Playlist View screen
[HDD] [RAM]
- -
Copy§
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
12.10. SUN 0:30
- -
Create
- -
- -
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
5 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
You can give names to playlists.
➡ 63, Entering text
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER].
➡ 45, Change Thumbnail
Change
Thumbnail
Create
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Enter Name
Delete
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Edit
Chapter operations
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–7
Add
Chapter
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Move
Chapter
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View
Chapter View screen
Playlists
HDD
Move Chapter
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
002
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
0:10.24
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
ENTER
RETURN
7 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
➡ 45, Create Chapter
Create
Chapter
Add Chapter
➡ 45, Combine Chapters
Move Chapter
Combine
Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
➡ 45, Delete Chapter
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Delete
Playlist View
Chapter§
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
§ Multiple editing is possible.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
3
Editing an album:
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Select the album to be edited and press
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
[SUB MENU].
2 3
1
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [SUB MENU] without selecting album.
4 5 6
7
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
0
Editing a still picture:
INPUT
SELECT
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [ENTER].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[SUB MENU].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
;
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
To show other pages
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
C
T
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
SUB MENU
“Green”
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [SD])
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 41)
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Enter Album Name
Delete Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
Select Folder
Album and picture operation (➡ 49)
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R and CD-R/CD-
RW.
Preparation
[RAM] [SD]
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
Delete Picture
Set up Protection
Album and picture operation
(➡ 49)
Cancel Protection
DPOF
You can go back to Album View.
Album View
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8415
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Album and picture operation
After performing steps 1–4, page 48
Delete Picture§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete Album§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
You can give names to albums.
Enter Album Name
➡ 63, Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
SD CARD
Pic
103__
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Album Name
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.
0001
0002
0006
0005
DPOF§
[SD]
You can select individual pictures for printing and specify the number of prints to be made.
DPOF
Press [2, 1] to select number of print (0 to 9) and
press [ENTER].
Set up DPOF on the picture (JPEG).
Setting on other equipment will be cancelled.
Number of prints
1
The DPOF mark appears.
To cancel the print setting
Set the number of print to “0”.
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if there is no remaining space
on the card.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add Pictures
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
2
3
4
e.g.,
Create Album
HDD
Step
1
Please select album to copy.
- - -
007
008
12. 5.06 Total 24
100_DVD
- - -
12. 6.06 Total 3
101_DVD
- - -
- - -
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
ENTER
Previous
Next
RETURN
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [ENTER].
Create Album
e.g.,
Copy all the pictures in the selected album?
Copy Pictures
Copy Album
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Pictures” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Album” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 63, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--/--/--].)
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [ENTER].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
RQT8415
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete Navigator
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
DVD
TV
Í
Í
1
While stopped
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Press [FUNCTIONS].
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
2 3
1
press [ENTER].
4 5 6
7
ShowView
DELETE
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Title View
8 9
0
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
007
008
INPUT
SELECT
DELETE
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
- - -
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
;
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Previous
Next
RETURN
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
C
T
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
N
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
3
If you want to delete a title:
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [ENTER].
“Red”
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
“Green”
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
If you want to delete an album:
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalized discs.)
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE].
If you want to delete a still picture:
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
∫ Available disc space after deleting
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the sub menu.
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 44, step
5).
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),
the space deleted becomes available for recording.
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 48,
step 4).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG) View”
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures
(➡ 48, step 4).
Available
disc space
......
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does
Available disc space
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
not increase even after
increases after deleting
[ENTER].
deleting
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
Title
Title
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
1
While playing
Press [DELETE].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
The title or the picture is deleted.
RQT8415
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
Copy
Advanced Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.
Features
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
settings.
way you want.
HDD ➝ DVD
Y
t
Y
Y
Copy direction
DVD ➝ HDD
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
Y
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalized discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
High speed mode copy§1
Y
t
Y§2
Changing recording mode
Finalize§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
Automatically finalized
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures on
an SD card (➡ 55)
Y
t
t
t
[HDD] [RAM] only
Copying playlists§4
t
Y
Y
t
t
t§5
t§6
t
Y
Y
t§5
t§6
t
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
Y
Y§7
Y§8
§1
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes
≥Playlists created from multiple titles using FR recording mode
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥MPEG2 moving picture titles copied to the HDD from an SD card
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode . (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (
➡
62).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalizing after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
16X Speed
DVD-R
4X Speed§1
DVD-RW
8X Speed§2
+R
4X Speed
+RW
4X Speed
2.4X Speed
+R DL
HDD
Rec
mode time
XP
SP
DVD-R DL
Rec
Required
Required
time
Required
time
15 min.
Required
time
Required
time
Required
time
Required
time
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
5
x
6 min.
10
x
x
x
x
x
4
8
x
x
15 min.
4
8
x
x
8 min. 35 s.
7
x
25 min. 2.4
12 min. 30 s. 4.8
6 min. 15 s. 7.2
x
x
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s. 16x
4
8
x
x
1
10
20
30
x
x
x
x
2 min. 25 s. 25
1 min. 15 s. 48
52 sec. 69
42 sec. 86
7 min. 30 s.
7 min. 30 s.
4 min. 10 s. 14
2 min. 25 s. 25
x
x
LP
1 hour
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
x
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
Regarding copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 81) compatible DVD-
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
≥
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
RQT8415
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
PAGE
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Numbered
buttons
want to copy and press [ENTER].
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register.
:, 9
;
1
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
C
T
FUNCTIONS
N
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
“Green”
SUB MENU
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
Copy starts.
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
To return to the previous screen
STATUS
Press [RETURN].
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
∫ To stop copying ➡ 54
[HDD]
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 66)
Copy speed
functions ➡ 54
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”.
High speed
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[SUB MENU].
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Normal speed
(Recording mode is
FR.)
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
Total
:
0
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When making a copy that contains titles recorded in “EP”
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
copy will be performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
),
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
≥If the copy destination disc space is exceeded, copy will be
performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
Page 01/01
Properties
Sort
ENTER
RETURN
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 67) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67)
and you are copying in XP mode.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [ENTER].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
Sort:
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Copying 16:9 aspect titles
The titles are copied in 4:3 aspect if you copy to a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
[Note]
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or
NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
[Note]
Preparation
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording compatible DVD-
R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 53).
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalized (➡ 81). After finalizing, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD]
>
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Total
:
0
Size:
0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
RQT8415
Page 01/01
Select
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
[HDD]
[SD]
>
[HDD]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy
>
>
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
( 0%)
0MB
Size:
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1
2
3
Copy Direction
HDD > DVD
No. Size
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
Create List
See also the notes “Before copying” (➡ 52).
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
1
While stopped
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Create List
HDD
VIDEO Playlists
and press [ENTER].
- - -
- - -
007
008
0:30(XP)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
Copy” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Previous
ENTER
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
Cancel All
S
SUB MENU
Next
RETURN
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD > DVD
Destination
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [ENTER].
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
2
0
Create List
3
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
Select the copy direction.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
” or
Start Copying
ENTER
RETURN
“
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
be registered.
” can
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 54)
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
Copying” and press [ENTER].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating
becomes louder than normal.
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [ENTER]
.
.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 66).
.
5
.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalize” or
“Copy Only” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy & Finalize” is selected
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
RQT8415
(Continued on the next page)
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued)
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 53, right column)
Add
Refer to the control reference on page 52.
1
2
Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Delete
Move
∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalizing)
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [ENTER].
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥When copying to a DVD-R DL or +R DL only the titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 53, Multiple editing).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
∫ To return to the previous screen
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 53, left column)
Press [RETURN].
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [ENTER] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Press [STATUS].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalize them after
copy.
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
(➡ 26)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (➡ 26)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
Size:
0MB (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
New item (Total=0)
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
RQT8415
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
When the top menu is displayed
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[ENTER].
[DVD-V]
>
[HDD]
You can copy the content of finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
3
4
05
06
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: DVD-Audio, Video CD, Audio
CD and so on.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalized disc (➡ 34).
[Note]
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
Video”) (➡ 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
6 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 53, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from
an SD card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying MPEG2.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD > HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
Copy Mode
2
3
VIDEO§
MPEG2
DVD-Video XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copy Time
HDD
Press ENTER to change settings.
Start Copying
ENTER
RETURN
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
DVD-RAM
6 Press [ENTER].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
§ Conventionally recorded programmes
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press
[ENTER]. Then go to step 7 on page 53.
SD Card
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
SELECT
Copying” and press [ENTER].
RETURN
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER] to start
copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalizing
the disc (➡ 62).
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 53)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source>SD Card
Copy Mode:
Format>VIDEO
≥MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card are automatically
registered on the copy list.
≥If there are no MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card, “Copy
Video (MPEG2)” is not displayed.
RQT8415
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
6 Register still pictures for copy.
DVD
TV
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
Í
Í
changes to it (➡ step 7).
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
Numbered
buttons
4 5 6
Copy
ShowView
DELETE
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
8 9
7
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
INPUT
SD CARD > HDD
0
SELECT
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
Create List
3
Page 01/01
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Create copy list.
Start Copying
ENTER
;
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
PROG/CCHECK
I
D
U
G
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[ENTER].
C
T
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
CREATE
CHAPTER
M
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R or CD-R/CD-RW.
[SD]
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [ENTER] and
then go to step 4 on page 57, “Copying all the still pictures on a
card—Copy All Pictures”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
SD Card
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
2
Press [
3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [ENTER].
Copy
SELECT
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
RETURN
ENTER
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD > HDD
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
Copy Mode
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Copying using the copying list
1
While stopped
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
Copy” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD > HDD
Destination
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
0
Create List
3
Copying” and press [ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
-
New folder
---
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
4
Press [
[ENTER].
3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
press [ENTER] to start copying.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
5 Set the recording mode.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [ENTER]
.
RQT8415
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
[SD]
>
[HDD] or [RAM]
Multiple editing
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
1
While stopped
∫ To edit the copying list
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
Delete All
(for a folder) (➡ 56, right column)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Add
1
2
Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
Delete
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Delete All:
Pictures” and press [ENTER].
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [ENTER].
Copy All Pictures
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Create List
SD CARD
Create List
SD CARD
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
Folder
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 56) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy All Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 37), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (➡ 49, Enter Album Name).
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
\DCIM\100__DVD
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
1 Press [SUB MENU] and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
Select Folder
folder and press [ENTER].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
list.
RETURN
ENTER
≥You cannot copy the information about the print number setting
(DPOF) or the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [ENTER].
RQT8415
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
3
When you want to start recording
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
Press [¥ REC].
2 3
1
Recording starts.
4 5 6
ShowView
DELETE
To skip unwanted parts
8 9
7
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
INPUT
INPUT SELECT
0
SELECT
To stop recording
Press [∫].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
∫
;
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 27), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
C
T
FUNCTIONS
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the play list is created automatically.
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
¥ REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
Preparation
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording
to start.
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
2
3
4
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.
3
EXT LINK
CH
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -UDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
This unit
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.
DV IN
DV Auto Rec
VIDEO IN L/MONO - AUDIO IN - R
S VIDEO IN
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press
[ENTER].
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Yellow White Red
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
You can proceed to step 4.
SELECT
S Video
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
ENTER
RETURN
≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.
Other video equipment
1
While stopped
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
Press [FUNCTIONS].
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” in
the Setup menu (➡ 67).
and press [ENTER].
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
[Note]
press [ENTER].
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
Manual recording
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 43).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
RQT8415
2 Start play on the other equipment.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (Q Link)
What is Q Link?
Q Link enables you to connect this unit to a Q Link equipped Panasonic TV and perform various linked functions.
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).
When you connect the unit to a TV, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the
unit, and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 18).
Download from the TV
TV/DVD Auto On
When you press the following buttons, linked operations with the TV activate and corresponding
screens appear.
When this unit is on:
Press [FUNCTIONS]
[1] (PLAY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
When this unit is off (standby mode):
Press [1] (PLAY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
≥[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on and corresponding screen appear when you insert the discs.
When you turn the TV off, the unit is turned off as well. However, this function works in the stop
mode.
This function does not work during the following operations: Preset Download, Auto-Setup, Auto
Clock Setting, Child Lock and Manual Tuning.
DVD Auto Standby
Direct TV Recording
You can at once record the same programme that you are watching on the TV.
≥This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the
TV without having to change the channels on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
The selected drive lights up on the unit’s display.
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Insert a disc. (➡ 24)
3 Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT8415
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Setting the protection
[RAM]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
Preparation
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
INPUT
0
SELECT
Protection” and press [ENTER].
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
press [ENTER].
PROG/CCHECK
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
ID
U
G
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
C
T
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
Disc Name
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
On
3,4,2,1
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
SELECT
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
ENTER
Format Disc
MANUAL SKIP
RETURN
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
Cartridge-protection
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
Common procedures
PROTECT
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
ShowView Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
You can provide a name for each disc.
HDD Management
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [ENTER].
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Management
DVD-RAM
➡ 63, Entering text
Disc Name
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Off
SELECT
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
ENTER
Format Disc
RETURN
Documentary
My favorite
01/02
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format
[HDD] [RAM]
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
[Note]
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finished.
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [ENTER].
7 Press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
press [ENTER].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
[Note]
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
7 Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
[Note]
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
Selecting the background style–Top Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalizing.
After finalizing
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 61) although it becomes play-only after finalizing.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-
minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [ENTER].
Top Menu List
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
1
2
3
Display after finalizing
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Before
After
finalizing
Title Name
finalizing
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 45,
Change Thumbnail)
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
Y
t
t
Y
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select
≥You cannot finalize discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalize discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalizing.
≥Discs finalized on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [ENTER].
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [ENTER].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalize
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalizing the disc.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Menu” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalize” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
7 Press [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
[Note]
A message appears when finalizing is finished.
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
≥You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥Finalizing takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalizing takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalizing.
This will render the disc unusable.
7 Press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
PAGE
CH
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
character and press [ENTER].
ShowView
DELETE
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
8 9
7
INPUT
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
¢
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
∫
;
PROG/CCHECK
e.g., entering the letter “R”
I
D
U
G
1
Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [ENTER].
7
7
C
T
N
O
6 M
T
C
ENTER
3,4,2,1
R
I
7
ENTER
P
T
7
SUB MENU
RETURN
≥To enter a space
Press [¢] and press [ENTER].
≥Add/recall names (➡ below)
S
SUB MENU
“Red”
RETURN
“Green”
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
8
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
3 Press [∫] (Set).
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
64 (44§)
To end partway
Title
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
Playlist
64
Album of still pictures
36
Disc ([RAM])
§ Title name for timer recording
64
∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 20
After entering the name (steps 1–2).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
Title
Disc
44
40
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
[SD]
Characters
36
2
Album of still pictures
[Note]
∫ To recall an added name
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
1 Show Enter Name screen.
2
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 30, right
column.
∫ To delete an added name
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
Title
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 44.
2
3
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
Press [SUB MENU] to show “Delete Name” and press
[ENTER].
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 47.
4
5
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Press [RETURN].
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 60.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 48, “To edit
the album”.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalization (➡ 62). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Press the “Red” button or
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Name
_
“Green” button to select
character type and press
[ENTER].
“Standard Characters”:
(➡ left, Alphabet characters,
etc.)
“Other Characters”:
(➡ below, Umlaut characters,
accented characters, etc.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Standard Characters
Other Characters
Enter Name
Chapter 1_
*
_
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
fl
O
[
&
@
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
N
]
;
π
Delete
m
n
o
*
M
P
T
Add to List
List Names
%
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
i
fl
&
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
Set
^
`
SELECT
Space
RETURN
ENTER
¡
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
¢
¬
¶
£
-
¤
®
¸
¥
¦
§
¨
©
³
ª
´
«
µ
¿
É
Ó
Ý
ç
¯
¹
˚
º
²
·
»
¼
Æ
Ð
½
Ç
Ñ
Û
å
¾
È
Á
Ë
Õ
ß
é
ó
ý
Â
Ì
Ã
Í
Ä
Î
À
Ê
Ô
Þ
è
Å
Ï
Ò
Ü
æ
ð
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Ö
à
ê
ô
þ
á
ë
õ
ÿ
â
ì
ã
í
ä
î
ï
ñ
û
ò
ö
÷
ø
ú
ù
RQT8415
ü
Space
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTIONS window
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
DVD
TV
1
While stopped
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
Press [FUNCTIONS].
SELECT
AV
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
FUNCTIONS
4 5 6
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
ShowView
DELETE
Playback
8 9
7
Recording
INPUT
Delete
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
PROG/CCHECK
I
D
U
G
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
C
T
press [ENTER].
N
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
≥If you select “To Others” and press [ENTER], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[ENTER].
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
FUNCTIONS
“Timer Recording”
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
ShowView Record
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
appears in countries
where the GUIDE Plus+
system is available.
Playback
Recording
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
Setup
HDD Management
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
ShowView
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Press and hold [ENTER]
and [RETURN]
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
PROG/CCHECK
ID
U
G
C
T
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
N
O
T
C
ENTER
ENTER
R
I
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
RQT8415
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Common procedures
W
X
CH
1
While stopped
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
Press [FUNCTIONS].
k
1
.3
EXT LINK
CH
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
∫
and press [ENTER].
< OPEN/CLOSE
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
DVD
TV
press [1].
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
Menus
Options
Tabs
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Setup
PAGE
CH
Remote Control
Clock
Power Save
Quick Start
DivX Registration
Initialize
DVD 1
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
Off
On
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
ShowView
DELETE
8 9
7
INPUT
0
SELECT
Display
Connection
Others
SELECT
TAB
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
RETURN
ENTER
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
PROG/CCHECK
press [ENTER].
ID
U
G
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
C
T
FUNCTIONS
N
O
T
C
ENTER
R
I
3,4,2,1
press [ENTER].
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
“Yellow”
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
REC
REC MODE
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
“Green”
To exit the screen
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
(continued on the next page)
RQT8415
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Manual (➡ 69)
Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 70)
Download from TV (➡ 70)
Settings for playback
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Disc
Ratings
≥8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
≥1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock
≥Change Level
≥Do not forget your password.
DVD-Audio Video mode Playback
≥On: The setting returns to “Off” when you change the disc or
Select “On” to play DVD-Video content on some DVD-Audio.
turn the unit off.
≥Off
Soundtrack Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥English
≥Spanish
≥German
≥Dutch
≥French
≥Italian
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite
any changes you make here.
≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥In case of English/French/German/Italian/
Subtitle
≥Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will automatically
appear if available on that disc.
Spanish/Dutch languages, when you make
download from TV, and Country setting of
Auto-Setup in plug-in, the language
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and
“Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.
≥Enter a code (➡ 71) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
≥English
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥German
≥Dutch
≥French
≥Italian
Menus
≥English
≥Spanish
≥German
≥Dutch
≥French
≥Italian
There are discs where you can only switch the ≥Other ¢¢¢¢
language from the menu screen (➡ 35).
Settings for Recording
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
≥EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).
disc.
≥EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when
using “EP (8 Hours)”.
Rec for High Speed Copy
≥On: Makes high speed mode copying to DVD-R, etc. possible.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
–Pictures are saved in 4:3.
When high speed copying a title to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, it is necessary
to turn this setting “On” before recording to the HDD; however,
the screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ right). We recommend
turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is
not necessary when recording a programme.
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio
Selection” (➡ 67).
≥Off
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
≥Maximum
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW
4X discs).
≥Normal (Silent):
Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
Comb Filter
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Picture
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 70).
Still Mode
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 81, Frames and fields).
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View. Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
RQT8415
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Sound
Bilingual Audio Selection
≥M 1
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
≥M 2
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select on the other equipment.
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ below, “Audio Mode When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
for XP Recording”).
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 17).
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
protection.
≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
and outputs it as 2 channels.
DTS
≥Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
[Note]
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
Not making the proper settings may result
logo.
in noise or some trouble for digital
recording.
MPEG
≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
≥Dolby Digital (➡ 81)
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥LPCM (➡ 81)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Audio Mode for DV Input
≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s ≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
DV input terminal (➡ 58).
subsequent to original recording.
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥Mix:
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Language
≥English
≥Español
≥Deutsch
≥Nederlands
≥Français
≥Italiano
Display
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen
messages.
On-Screen Messages
≥Automatic
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
≥Off
Grey Background
≥On
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
≥Off
FL Display
≥Bright
≥Dim
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 68) to “On”.
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
RQT8415
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
TV Aspect (➡ 18)
Progressive (➡ 22)
Set to match the type of television ≥16:9
≥4:3
≥Off
≥Letterbox
Connection
connected.
≥On
This setting is fixed with
“Off” if you set “AV1 Output”
to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2
(without component)”.
TV System (➡ 70)
≥PAL
≥NTSC
AV1 Output
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
≥
Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
S Video (with component):
≥
Select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)” for RGB output.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
for component output (progressive output).
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without
component)”.
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
≥RGB 1 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
signal. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit
in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will
automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when
the unit is turned on.
≥RGB 2 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
signal. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the
unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
≥RGB/Video
≥RGB
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording
RGB output from external equipment.
≥Video
≥S Video
AV2 Connection
This setting is fixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
≥Decoder: When a decoder is connected to descramble the
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).
≥Ext:
When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is
connected.
Ext Link
≥Ext Link 1: When a digital/satellite receiver which transmits a
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin
Scart cable is connected.
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
≥Ext Link 2: When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
Remote Control (➡ 23)
≥DVD 1
≥DVD 2
≥DVD 3
Others
Clock (➡ 71)
Power Save
≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 67).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
to standby (➡ 82).
≥Off
–When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched
on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is
not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.
≥If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.
Quick Start
≥On
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
something.
≥Off:
Standby power consumption is less than when this is
set to “On”.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥
If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-
RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
DivX Registration
≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 39).
Initialize
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
≥Yes
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password
and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.
≥No
Default Settings
≥Yes
All the settings other than the programmed channels, time
settings, country settings, language settings, disc language
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control
code, return to the factory presets.
≥No
RQT8415
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning
∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position
1
While stopped
Pos
Name
Channel
1
ARD
4
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
Manual
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Tuning
Fine Tuning Auto
to select a
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Video System
Audio Mode
Mono
Auto
BG
programme position
and press [ENTER].
SELECT
Off
and press [ENTER].
Title Page
301
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
RETURN : leave
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
Pos
To change the programme position in which
the TV stations are assigned
press [1].
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
Tuning
Disc
Name
Channel
To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [ENTER].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
ENTER
To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
Manual
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Manual” and
press [ENTER].
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[ENTER].
Manual Tuning
If you delete programme position
of Host channel, GUIDE Plus+ data
is also deleted. Continue?
Fine Tuning
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [ENTER].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
Video
To select the video system type
Yes
No
System
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [ENTER].
If you select “Yes” and press [ENTER], the following screen
appears.
Auto:
This unit automatically distinguishes
PAL and SECAM signals.
For receiving PAL signals.
Manual Tuning
PAL:
Pos Name Ch
Pos Name Ch
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.
1
2
ARD
ZDF
N3
4
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3
4
5
5
8
10
Audio
Mode§1
To select the audio reception type
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG” or “L” and press [ENTER].
BG: PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G
HR3
BR3
6
7
8
9
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
10
Delete
Move
Add
L: SECAM L, L’
Mono
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM§2 broadcast,
and press [ENTER].
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To add a blank programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.
Title Page
To enter the Teletext title page for a channel
Entering title page number allows the unit to
automatically record programme and station
names.
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the
number and press [ENTER].
To move a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to
which you want to assign the TV station and press [ENTER].
≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer
to its Teletext TV guide.
[Note]
≥When the unit connected to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automatically (➡ 18), only
deletion of the programme position can be performed.
≥If you delete programme position of Host Channel, the GUIDE
Plus+ data is also deleted.
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external
input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4) in step 5.
≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match
the connected equipment.
≥Title Page (Auto/Off)
§1 It is not displayed in Germany. Audio reception type is fixed at
“BG”.
RQT8415
§2 Not provided for Germany.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
Restart set up
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 18) fails for some reason.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
1
While stopped
Restart” or “Download from TV” and
press [ENTER].
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
The confirmation screen appears.
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q
Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV and
copied through this convenient function.)
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
press [ENTER].
and press [1].
≥If the country setting menu appears on the television
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
and press [ENTER].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
and press [ENTER].
Setup
TV System
PAL
NTSC
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
SELECT
Connection
Others
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
ENTER
RETURN
≥PAL (factory preset)
When the GUIDE Plus+ system setting message appears.
≥If you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Go to step 2 on page 19.
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
≥If you do not want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Setup is complete.
≥NTSC
List of TV Reception Channels
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
TV Channel
Channel
Other
Countries
indication
Germany/Italy
France
2 – 4
2 – 4
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
5 – 10, G – J
(172.00 to
220.00 MHz)
(INTER
E2 – E10
press [ENTER].
5 – 10
E2 – E12
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
BANDE)
E11 – E12
(Germany)
H1 – H2 (Italy)
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
11 – 12
13 – 20
—
A – H (Only
Italy)
—
—
∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit for 5 or more seconds.
21 – 69
74 – 78
80
E21 – E69
S01 – S05
S1
E21 – E69
E21 – E69
S1 – S5
M1
—
—
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be
used.
B – F
(100.00 to
172.00 MHz)
(INTER
81 – 89
90 – 99
S2 – S10
M2 – M10
U1 – U10
BANDE)
K – Q (220.00
to 300.00 MHz)
(INTER
S11 – S20
BANDE)
S21 – S41
(299.25 to
467.25 MHz)
(INTER
S21 – S41§
(Hyperband)
S21 – S41
(Hyperband)
121 – 141
RQT8415
BANDE)
70
§ Only for 8 MHz channel raster
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Clock Setting
Usually, the unit’s setup function (➡ 18) automatically adjusts the clock to correct time. Under some reception conditions, however, the unit
cannot set the clock automatically.
In this case, follow the operation steps below to manually set the clock.
≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [ENTER].
Clock
Automatic Off
Time
15
Date
1
:
45
:
39
.
8
.
2006
Number
0
9
Please set clock manually.
ENTER: store RETURN: leave
CHANGE
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
7 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
8 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
9 Press [ENTER] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day.
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Ameharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT8415
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Page
Authorization Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
38, 39
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
—
—
24
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
70
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record on the disc.
Unable to format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
37
13
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
45, 50,
61
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
≥Use a new disc.
—
—
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
7, 37
13
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
7
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
45, 49,
50, 61
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
54, 57
4–5
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTIONS menu.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
61
—
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
≥
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
50
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
39
—
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
$
RQT8415
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
23
(“∑” stands for a number.)
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same time for
more than 2 seconds.
GUIDE
≥GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.
20
—
HARD ERR§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was
purchased.
NoERAS
NoREAD
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD-RAM lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
—
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken.
Wait until the message disappears.
PROG FULL§
SLEEP
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
31
9
≥In order to extend HDD life, the HDD is in SLEEP mode.
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”,”LP” and the numbers
are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
—
The example “ SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
61
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
U59
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
4–6
—
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the
rear of the unit.
U61
U88
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
76
—
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby. Now press
[Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
H or F
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
—
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
76–80
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service
.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
64
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
§The message are alternately displayed.
RQT8415
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
17
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥DVD-Video:
You can play DVD-Video multi channel surround by digitally connecting an amplifier
equipped with a Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
≥DVD-Audio:
—
17
This unit plays DVD-Audio in 2 channels. You cannot play multi channel surround sound.
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
The television has a Scart terminal and ≥If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart
14–16
component video input terminal. Which
should I connect with?
terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB
compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and
Video CDs bought in another country?
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cover
—
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
—
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW ≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
6, 37
compatibility with this unit.
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still
pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
—
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.
—
—
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
recorded on this unit be played on other
equipment?
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
—
Can I record digital audio signals using
this unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output
only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video
camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
67
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
—
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
36
67
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥Yes, you can.
51
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT8415
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GUIDE Plus+
Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only
available after approx. 2 hours?
≥The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited. Depending on the country, signal
quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready
can vary.
—
—
The Host Channel in France is Canal
Plus. Do I have to sign a contract with
Canal Plus in order to be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system?
≥No, you can use the GUIDE Plus+ system without a contract.
How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data
updated and when?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the television station
transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at
2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off.
20
30
Is it possible to programme a recording, ≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
menu.
with a start and end time that are
different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?
Does the GUIDE Plus+ system support ≥The GUIDE Plus+ system works independently of VPS/PDC. However, you can
32
31
programme TIMER recordings with VPS/PDC in the Timer Recording menu.
VPS/PDC?
How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?
≥The “F” symbol appears in the GUIDE Plus+ when a Timer Recording is programmed
with the GUIDE Plus+ system. To cancel a Timer Recording programming, press [PROG/
CHECK]. Select the desired entry and press [¢].
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data ≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
30, 33
Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.
via a connected satellite receiver or a
Set Top Box?
What happens when I unplug my unit
from the power outlet?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the
power supply for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Make sure
that the time is set again appropriately.
—
What happens if my postal code
changes, e.g. if I move?
≥Change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full
Auto-Setup. Saved GUIDE Plus+ data may be lost.
21
RQT8415
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
operations are slow to respond in SLEEP mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Power
Page
No power.
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
14, 15
33
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
The unit switches to standby mode. ≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
Displays
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
67
71
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock.
The time recorded on the disc
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
—
—
and the available time shown do ≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
not add up.
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
The play time shown for MP3
does not agree with the actual
time.
—
—
—
The clock is not correct.
≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not
work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock
Setting does not work, set the time manually.
71
Compared to the actual recorded ≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
—
—
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
Status messages do not appear. ≥Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.
67
67
The grey background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
—
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
43
68
Screen size is wrong.
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On”
in the Setup menu.
66
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
43
43
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method
or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,
14–16
appear on the television.
S VIDEO OUT terminal or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
—
—
Picture is distorted.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
70
RQT8415
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound
Page
No sound.
Low volume.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
14–17,
67
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
36
43
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output. When playing multi-
channel DVD-Audio, only audio for the two front channels will be output. Refer to the disc’s
jacket.
—
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
—
26
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
—
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
67
26
≥When connecting an amplifier using an optical digital cable, you cannot switch the audio if
“Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio
cables.
17, 67
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
23
23
control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same
time for more than 2 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
11
—
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
—
—
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
23
23
64
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
24, 34
—
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
—
—
1
2
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
HDD activation is slow.
Cannot eject disc.
≥The HDD is in SLEEP mode. (“SLEEP” appears in the unit’s display.)
9
≥The unit is recording.
—
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
33
64
Cannot tune channels.
≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable to download channel presets.
14–15
—
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.
Startup is slow.
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
68
—
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
Takes time to read DVD-RAM.
≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.
—
RQT8415
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Recording, timer recording and copying
Page
4, 5
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
61
60
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
81
45, 50,
61
—
≥
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
45, 50,
61
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalized discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
—
—
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and
NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
—
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
14–15,
58
—
≥Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3”, “AV4” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected.
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
31
31
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
SHOWVIEW programming does not
work properly.
1
Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
≥Set the clock.
71
21
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours
to complete data download. If you want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off”.
Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”
disappears.)
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
31
33
—
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
30
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
61
The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.
≥There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old programme name.
—
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu.
26
—
disc using the high speed mode. ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in EP or FR (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
—
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
—
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
—
—
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
58
—
—
—
58
RQT8415
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play
Page
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
34
10
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
4–6
—
—
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
66
—
39
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
—
—
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
—
5
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
66
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
35
No subtitles.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
42
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] [SD] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
—
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.
70
—
Time Slip does not work.
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
70
recorded on the disc.
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
—
—
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
50
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
50
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
—
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
—
—
Cannot delete chapters.
Cannot create a playlist.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
45
—
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
RQT8415
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Still pictures
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for
linked timer recording with external equipment.
—
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
60
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
7, 37
61
7
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB.
—
—
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
—
61
GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ System does
not receive any data.
≥Check whether GUIDE Plus+ system setup was performed in full.
The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several times each day. When the unit is first
connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can
display the television programme list.
19–21
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not
be able to receive any data.
71
—
“No Data” is displayed for some ≥These stations may not have been able to be identified automatically.
20
or all stations.
For these stations, select the “On” in the SUB MENU under “Editor” and assign the correct
reference station manually.
≥Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
—
The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.
≥The reference station is not assigned correctly in “Editor”.
Select the correct reference station.
≥There was a programme change.
20
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or
station provider.
—
The GUIDE Plus+ data transfer
was interrupted.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.
≥The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode
(EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
—
—
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “Night Download” and change the setting in GUIDE Plus+.
21
“No Data” is displayed in the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via SHOWVIEW.
30
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the
programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
68
68
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
—
—
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
RQT8415
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Bitstream
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
u
r
Frame
Field
Field
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
DivX
A video compression format developed by DivXNetworks, Inc. that
compresses video files without any considerable loss of video
quality.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
MPEG2 moving picture files shot with a Panasonic SD multi-camera,
etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality. You
can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and CD-RW.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
This is a system used to display the television programme list on
televisions, computers and cellular phones. Data is transmitted using
the internet or television waves. This unit is compatible with the
method using television waves. You can use the television
programme list for functions such as timer recording.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
Film and video
The PAL video signal standard has 625 (or 576) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 625p (or 576p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 525i (or 480i) and 525p (or 480p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames
per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
Finalize
RGB
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or memory card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG, TIFF) and MPEG2 are stored.
Thumbnail
Formatting
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD Memory Cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit. Formatting deletes irrevocably all contents.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures,
a common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
RQT8415
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
Video
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
Video system:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording system:
Recordable discs
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
DVD-RAM:
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver.2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0
RGB in (PAL):
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
DVD-R:
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver.2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver.2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver.3.0
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
for DL Ver.3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
DVD-RW:
+R:
Ver. 1.x/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/6X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
Tuner system
Channel coverage
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
PAL-BGH
SECAM-BG
(CCIR)
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)
UHF: 21–69
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41
Ver. 1.3
for DL Ver.1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver.1.2/4X-SPEED
SECAM-L, L’§2
(France)
+RW:
VHF: 2–10
UHF: 21–69
CATV: B–Q (100.5 to 299.5 MHz),
S21–S41 (299.5 to 467.25 MHz)
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
RF converter output:
Not provided
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
SD card slot
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF)
Compatible media:
Format:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§3, MultiMediaCard
FAT12, FAT16
Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
(sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Playable discs
TIFF (Uncompressed RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
Number of pixels:
Thawing time:
34 a 34 to 6144 a 4096
Approx. 3 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
SD Video (MPEG2)
Compatible media:
SD Memory Card§3, MultiMediaCard
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD§1, MP3, JPEG, DivX formatted discs)
SVCD§1
Codec:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
File Format:
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc, the playback is possible.
Internal HDD capacity
Optical pick-up
160 GB
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
DV input (PAL/NTSC)
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
DVD
Laser power:
Others
Region code:
‚ 2
5 to 40 oC
10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 31 W
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkDkH):
Mass:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
NORSK
Bølgelengde:
CD
DVD
Laserstyrke:
Approx. 430 mmk329 mmk58 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
780 nm
662 nm
Ingen farlig stråling sendes ut
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Audio
Recording system:
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Output level:
[Note]
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions are approximate.
§1 Conforming to IEC62107
§2 Not provided for Germany.
§3 Includes miniSDTM cards. (A miniSDTM adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
RQT8415
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Service
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your
local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subject of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its related affiliates.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY
WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE
PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT
SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC.
AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR
ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF
ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.
MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SD logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
Official DivX Certified™ product.
Plays DivX 5, DivX 4, DivX 3, and DivX VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
®
®
®
®
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license.
RQT8415
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Album
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment– Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ext Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 68
Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Audio
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 32
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62, 81
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 61, 81
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 25
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rec for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . 26, 66
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 58
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
RGB
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 19–21, 28–29
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . 8
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Language
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 81
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connection
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Shipping Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SHOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38–39
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . 17
Digital receiver,
satellite receiver, decoder . . . . . . . . . 15
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–16
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Copy
SD card (MPEG2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 45
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 45
Noise reduction (NR)
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tuning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Delete
VPS/PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
V.S.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DELETE Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 34, 40, 44, 48
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37–39, 81
DPOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 81
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 66
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 43, 81
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
p
RQT8415-L
F0106EN0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miller Electric Work Light Coolmate 1 User Manual
Milwaukee Sander HEAVY DUTYSANDERS User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor 42VP4 User Manual
Omega Marine Radio HHLM 1MV User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Amplifier R 805X User Manual
Onkyo Stereo System TX NR5007 User Manual
Optimus Home Theater System 31 3044 User Manual
Oreck Vacuum Cleaner XL3605HH User Manual
Panasonic DVR DMR EX85 User Manual
Panasonic Switch AM1 NZ BASIC User Manual